1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
6 \def\texinfoversion{2012-09-04.17}
8 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10 % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
15 % License, or (at your option) any later version.
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
20 % General Public License for more details.
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
25 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
26 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
27 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
29 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
30 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
31 % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
32 % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
34 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
35 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
37 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
38 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
39 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
41 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
42 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
43 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
48 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
49 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
50 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
51 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
53 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
54 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
55 % full Texinfo distribution.
57 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
60 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
62 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
63 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
64 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
65 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
70 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
71 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
74 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
76 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
84 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88 \let\ptexindent=\indent
89 \let\ptexinsert=\insert
92 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
93 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
95 \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
101 {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104 % starts a new line in the output.
107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119 \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
120 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
121 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
122 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
123 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
124 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
125 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
126 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
127 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
128 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
129 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
130 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
131 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
132 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
133 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
134 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
135 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
136 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
138 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
139 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
140 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
141 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
142 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
143 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
144 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
145 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
146 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
147 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
148 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
149 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
151 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
152 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
153 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
154 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
155 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
157 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
158 \chardef\spacecat = 10
159 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
161 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
162 \chardef\ampChar = `\&
163 \chardef\colonChar = `\:
164 \chardef\commaChar = `\,
165 \chardef\dashChar = `\-
166 \chardef\dotChar = `\.
167 \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
168 \chardef\hashChar = `\#
169 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
170 \chardef\questChar = `\?
171 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
172 \chardef\semiChar = `\;
173 \chardef\slashChar = `\/
174 \chardef\underChar = `\_
180 % The following is used inside several \edef's.
181 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
185 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
186 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
187 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
188 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
189 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
191 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
192 wide-spread wrap-around
195 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
196 \newdimen\bindingoffset
197 \newdimen\normaloffset
198 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
200 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
201 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
202 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
204 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
206 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
207 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
208 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
209 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
210 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
212 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
216 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
221 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
222 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
229 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
233 % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
234 % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
237 \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
238 \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
240 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
241 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
243 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
244 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
245 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
246 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
247 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
248 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
250 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
253 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
255 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
256 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
258 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
259 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
260 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
261 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
263 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
264 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
265 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
267 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
268 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
270 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
271 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
272 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
273 % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
274 % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
275 % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
277 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
278 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
279 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
280 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
281 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
283 \the\toks0 \the\toks2
284 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
285 \noexpand\else \the\toks8
288 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
289 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
290 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
291 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
293 \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
295 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
297 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
298 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
300 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
301 \def\lastchapterdefs{}
302 \def\lastsectiondefs{}
303 \def\prevchapterdefs{}
304 \def\prevsectiondefs{}
307 % Main output routine.
309 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
314 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
315 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
317 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
319 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
320 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
322 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
323 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
324 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
325 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
326 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
327 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
330 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
331 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
332 % before the \shipout runs.
334 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
335 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
336 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
337 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
338 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
339 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
341 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
343 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
344 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
346 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
348 \vskip-\topandbottommargin
350 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
353 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
355 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
358 \vskip\topandbottommargin
360 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
361 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
367 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
368 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
369 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
370 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
376 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
377 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
378 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
379 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
382 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
384 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
387 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
389 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
391 }% end of \shipout\vbox
392 }% end of group with \indexdummies
394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
397 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
399 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
401 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
402 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
403 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
404 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
405 \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
406 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
407 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
410 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
411 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
412 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
414 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
416 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
417 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
419 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
421 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
422 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
423 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
425 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
426 \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
432 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
436 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
437 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
438 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
442 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
443 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
444 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
446 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
448 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
449 % @end itemize @c foo
450 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
451 % by \finishparsearg.
453 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
454 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
455 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
458 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
459 \let\temp\finishparsearg
461 \let\temp\argcheckspaces
463 % Put the space token in:
467 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
468 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
469 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
470 % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
471 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
472 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
473 % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
475 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
477 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
479 % \parseargdef\foo{...}
480 % is roughly equivalent to
481 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
484 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
485 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
488 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
490 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
495 % Several utility definitions with active space:
500 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
501 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
502 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
503 % should produce a line of output anyway.
505 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
507 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
508 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
509 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
510 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
514 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
516 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
521 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
522 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
523 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
524 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
525 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
527 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
528 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
529 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
533 % At run-time, environments start with this:
534 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
538 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
539 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
540 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
542 % Check whether we're in the right environment:
551 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
554 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
555 not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
557 \def\inenvironment#1{%
559 outside of any environment%
561 in environment \expandafter\string#1%
565 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
566 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
569 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
571 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
572 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
573 \csname E#1\endcsname
578 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
581 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
582 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
583 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
584 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
585 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
587 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
588 % if the definition is written into an index file.
589 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
590 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
593 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
594 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
596 % @* forces a line break.
597 \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
599 % @/ allows a line break.
602 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
603 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
605 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
606 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
608 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
609 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
611 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
616 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
618 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
619 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
622 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
626 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
627 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
628 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
629 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
631 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
632 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
633 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
634 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
635 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
636 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
637 % the text is small, which looks bad.
639 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
640 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
641 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
642 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
643 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
644 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
650 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
651 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
652 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
656 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
657 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
658 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
659 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
660 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
661 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
662 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
666 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
667 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
668 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
669 % above. But it's pretty close.
671 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
672 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
673 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
674 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
675 \egroup % End the \vtop.
676 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
677 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
678 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
679 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
680 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
681 % group, force a page break.
682 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
683 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
692 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
693 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
695 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
696 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
697 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
699 % @need space-in-mils
700 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
702 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
705 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
709 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
711 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
712 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
713 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
715 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
716 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
717 % And a page break here is fine.
718 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
720 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
721 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
722 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
723 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
724 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
726 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
727 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
728 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
729 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
730 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
731 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
732 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
735 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
738 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
743 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
747 % @page forces the start of a new page.
749 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
752 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
754 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
755 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
756 \newskip\exdentamount
758 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
759 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
761 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
762 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
763 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
765 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
766 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
767 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
769 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
770 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
772 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
775 \vtop to \strutdepth{%
776 \baselineskip=\strutdepth
778 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
779 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
781 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
783 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
788 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
789 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
791 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
792 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
793 % else use TEXT for both).
795 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
796 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
797 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
799 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
802 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
807 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
809 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
814 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
815 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
816 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
817 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
818 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
819 % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
822 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
825 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
827 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
828 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
831 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
832 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
835 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
836 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
838 % This is the space between the bar and the text.
844 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
846 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
851 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
852 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
853 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
854 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
855 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
857 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
863 \def\filenamecatcodes{%
877 \def\pushthisfilestack{%
878 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
880 \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
881 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
883 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
884 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
887 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
888 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
889 the stack of filenames is empty.}}
894 % outputs that line, centered.
896 \parseargdef\center{%
898 \let\centersub\centerH
900 \let\centersub\centerV
902 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
903 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
907 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
908 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
913 \newcount\centerpenalty
915 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
916 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
917 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
918 % prevent a page break here.
919 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
920 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
921 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
922 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
925 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
927 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
929 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
930 % @c is the same as @comment
931 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
933 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
934 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
936 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
940 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
941 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
942 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
943 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
945 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
948 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
953 \defaultparindent = 0pt
955 \defaultparindent = #1em
958 \parindent = \defaultparindent
961 % @exampleindent NCHARS
962 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
963 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
964 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
965 \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
972 \lispnarrowing = #1em
977 % @firstparagraphindent WORD
978 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
979 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
982 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
983 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
984 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
985 % By default, we suppress indentation.
987 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
988 \def\insertword{insert}
990 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
993 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
994 \else\ifx\temp\insertword
995 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
998 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1002 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
1003 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1005 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1008 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1010 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1014 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1017 \global\everypar = {%
1019 \restorefirstparagraphindent
1023 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1024 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1025 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1026 \global \everypar = {}%
1030 % @refill is a no-op.
1033 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1034 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1035 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1037 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1038 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1040 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1041 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1042 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1044 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1047 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1048 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1049 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1051 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1053 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1054 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1055 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1056 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1059 \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1062 % Called from \setfilename.
1074 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1078 % adobe `portable' document format
1082 \newcount\filenamelength
1091 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1093 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1094 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1095 \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1097 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1106 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1107 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1108 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1109 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1111 % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1112 % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1113 % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1114 % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1115 % do this reliably, so we use it.
1117 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1119 \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1120 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
1121 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1122 % Many times it won't matter.
1124 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1125 % backslashes, and other special chars.
1126 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1130 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1131 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1132 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1137 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
1138 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1139 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1141 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1142 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1144 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1145 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1146 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
1148 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1149 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1151 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1156 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1157 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1158 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1159 \def\lastcolordefs{}
1163 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1171 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1173 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1174 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1182 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1184 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1185 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1186 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1187 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1189 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1190 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1191 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1193 \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1195 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1196 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1197 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1198 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1199 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1200 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1201 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1202 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1203 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1205 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1207 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1209 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1211 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1213 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1218 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1219 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1220 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1223 \immediate\pdfximage
1225 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
1226 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
1227 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1232 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1233 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1237 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1238 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1241 \makevalueexpandable
1242 \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1243 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1244 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1247 % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1250 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
1251 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
1252 \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1253 \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1254 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1256 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1257 % come from Petr Olsak
1258 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1259 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1260 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1261 \advance\tempnum by 1
1262 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1264 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1265 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1266 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1267 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1268 % #4 is the page number
1270 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1271 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1272 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1273 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1274 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1275 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1276 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1277 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1279 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
1282 % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
1283 \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1284 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1286 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1289 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1291 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1292 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1293 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1294 \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1296 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1298 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1299 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1300 \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1301 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1303 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1304 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1305 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1307 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1308 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1310 \def\thischapnum{0}%
1312 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1314 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1315 % al. a second time, below.
1316 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1317 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1318 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1319 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1320 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1321 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1322 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1323 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1326 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1327 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1328 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1330 % We use the node names as the destinations.
1331 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1332 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1333 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1334 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1335 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1336 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1337 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1338 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1340 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1341 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1342 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1343 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1344 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1346 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1347 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
1348 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
1349 % we use for the index sort strings.
1353 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1354 % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1355 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1356 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1357 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1358 \input \tocreadfilename
1361 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1362 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1363 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1364 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1367 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1368 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1369 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1370 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1371 \advance\filenamelength by 1
1374 \def\getfilename#1{%
1376 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1377 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1379 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1381 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1382 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1384 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1386 % make a live url in pdf output.
1389 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1390 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1391 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1392 % people have actually reported a problem with.
1394 \normalturnoffactive
1397 \makevalueexpandable
1398 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1399 % special-casing \var here?
1402 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1403 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1404 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1406 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1407 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1408 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1409 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1411 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1413 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1414 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1415 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1417 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1418 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1420 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1421 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1423 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1425 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1426 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1428 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1429 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1430 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1433 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1434 \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1435 \let\endlink = \relax
1436 \let\setcolor = \gobble
1437 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1438 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1439 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1444 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1445 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1446 % italics, not bold italics.
1448 \def\setfontstyle#1{%
1449 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1450 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
1453 % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1455 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1457 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1458 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1459 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1460 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1461 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1463 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1464 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
1465 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
1467 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1468 % So we set up a \sf.
1470 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1471 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1473 % We don't need math for this font style.
1474 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1477 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1478 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1479 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1481 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1482 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1483 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1485 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1486 \def\baselinefactor{1}
1488 \newdimen\textleading
1491 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1492 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1494 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1495 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1496 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1500 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1502 % do nothing with this by default.
1503 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1504 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1505 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1507 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1508 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1509 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1510 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1512 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1513 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1514 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1515 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1516 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1517 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1520 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1528 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1530 1 begincodespacerange
1586 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1592 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1593 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1598 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1599 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1600 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1601 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1602 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1603 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1606 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1614 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1616 1 begincodespacerange
1674 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1680 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
1681 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1686 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1687 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1688 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1689 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1690 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1691 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1694 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1702 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
1704 1 begincodespacerange
1749 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1755 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
1756 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1761 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
1762 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1763 % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
1771 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1772 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
1773 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
1775 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1780 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1781 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1782 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1783 \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
1786 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1788 \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
1793 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
1803 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
1805 \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1806 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1807 \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1808 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1809 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1810 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1811 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1812 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1813 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1814 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1815 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1816 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1817 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1818 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1819 \def\textecsize{1095}
1821 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1822 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1823 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1824 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1825 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1827 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1828 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1829 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1830 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1831 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1832 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1833 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1834 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1835 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1836 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1839 \def\smallecsize{0900}
1841 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1842 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1843 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1844 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1845 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1846 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1847 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1848 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1849 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1850 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1851 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1852 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1853 \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1855 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1856 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1857 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1858 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1859 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1860 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1861 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1862 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1863 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1864 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1865 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1866 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1867 \def\titleecsize{2074}
1869 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1870 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1871 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1872 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
1873 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1874 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1875 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1876 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
1878 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1879 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1880 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1881 \def\chapecsize{1728}
1883 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
1884 \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1885 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1886 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
1887 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1888 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1889 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1890 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1892 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1893 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1894 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1895 \def\sececsize{1440}
1897 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1898 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1899 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1900 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
1901 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1902 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1903 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
1904 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1906 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1907 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1908 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1909 \def\ssececsize{1200}
1911 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1912 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1913 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1914 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1915 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1916 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
1917 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1918 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1919 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1920 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1921 \font\reducedi=cmmi10
1922 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1923 \def\reducedecsize{1000}
1925 \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
1926 \textfonts % reset the current fonts
1928 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
1931 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
1932 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
1933 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
1934 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
1936 \def\definetextfontsizex{%
1937 % Text fonts (10pt).
1938 \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
1939 \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
1940 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1941 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1942 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1943 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1944 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1945 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1946 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1947 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1948 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1949 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1950 \def\textecsize{1000}
1952 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1953 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1954 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1955 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1956 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1958 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1959 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1960 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1961 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1962 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1963 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1964 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1965 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1966 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1967 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1970 \def\smallecsize{0900}
1972 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1973 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1974 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1975 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1976 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1977 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1978 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1979 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1980 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1981 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1982 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1983 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1984 \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1986 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1987 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1988 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1989 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1990 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1991 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1992 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1993 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1994 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1995 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1996 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1997 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1998 \def\titleecsize{2074}
2000 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2001 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2002 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2003 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2004 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2005 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2006 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2007 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2009 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2010 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2011 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2012 \def\chapecsize{1440}
2014 % Section fonts (12pt).
2015 \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2016 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2017 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2018 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2019 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2020 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2021 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2023 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2025 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2026 \def\sececsize{1200}
2028 % Subsection fonts (10pt).
2029 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2030 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2031 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2032 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2033 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2034 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2035 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2037 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2040 \def\ssececsize{1000}
2042 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2043 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2044 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2045 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2046 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2047 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2048 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2049 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2050 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2051 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2052 \font\reducedi=cmmi9
2053 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2054 \def\reducedecsize{0900}
2056 \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
2057 \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
2058 \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2060 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
2063 % We provide the user-level command
2065 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
2071 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2072 \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2073 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2075 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2076 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2078 \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2079 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2080 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2083 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2089 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2090 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
2091 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
2092 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
2093 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2095 \def\resetmathfonts{%
2096 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
2097 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
2098 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2101 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2102 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2103 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2104 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2106 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2107 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
2108 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2110 % This all needs generalizing, badly.
2113 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
2114 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2115 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
2116 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2117 \def\curfontsize{text}%
2118 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2119 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2121 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
2122 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
2123 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
2124 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2125 \def\curfontsize{title}%
2126 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2127 \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
2128 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2130 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
2131 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2132 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
2133 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
2134 \def\curfontsize{chap}%
2135 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2136 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
2138 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
2139 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2140 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
2141 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2142 \def\curfontsize{sec}%
2143 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2144 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
2146 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
2147 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2148 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
2149 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2150 \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2151 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2152 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2153 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
2155 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
2156 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
2157 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
2158 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2159 \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2160 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2161 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2163 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
2164 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
2165 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
2166 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2167 \def\curfontsize{small}%
2168 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2169 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2171 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
2172 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
2173 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
2174 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2175 \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2176 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2177 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
2179 % Fonts for short table of contents.
2180 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2181 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
2182 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2183 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2185 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2186 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2187 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2189 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2190 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2192 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2193 % can fit this many characters:
2194 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
2195 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2196 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
2197 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2198 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
2200 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2201 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
2204 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2206 \definetextfontsizexi
2211 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2212 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2213 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2214 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
2216 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2218 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2219 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2220 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2221 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2222 % currently in effect.
2226 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2227 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2230 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2231 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2232 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2233 \newif\ifmarkupexample
2235 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2237 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2239 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2240 \csname markup#1true\endcsname
2241 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2245 \let\markupstylesetup\empty
2247 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2248 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2249 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2253 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2254 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2255 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2256 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2257 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2260 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2261 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2262 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2263 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2270 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
2271 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
2273 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
2274 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
2276 \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
2279 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2280 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2282 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2283 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2285 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
2286 \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
2288 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2289 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2291 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2292 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2294 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
2296 % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
2297 % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
2298 % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
2299 % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
2300 % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
2302 \def\codequoteright{%
2303 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2304 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2310 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2311 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2312 % the code environments to do likewise.
2314 \def\codequoteleft{%
2315 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2316 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2317 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2318 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2324 % Commands to set the quote options.
2326 \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2329 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2331 \else\ifx\temp\offword
2332 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2335 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2336 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2340 \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2343 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2345 \else\ifx\temp\offword
2346 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2349 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2350 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2354 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2355 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2357 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2358 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2362 % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2363 % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2364 % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2365 \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2367 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
2368 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2371 \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2372 \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2374 % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
2375 % character) is such as not to need one.
2376 \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
2385 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl, and no ic.
2386 % @var is set to this for defun arguments.
2387 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
2389 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
2390 % ttsl for book titles, do we?
2391 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
2395 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
2396 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
2401 \let\slanted=\smartslanted
2402 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
2403 \let\emph=\smartitalic
2405 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2406 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
2407 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2408 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2410 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
2414 % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2415 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2417 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2418 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2419 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2421 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2422 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2424 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2425 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2426 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2429 \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2430 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2431 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2432 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2434 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2435 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2436 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2437 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2440 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2442 % @t, explicit typewriter.
2444 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2449 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2451 % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
2452 \let\indicateurl=\samp
2454 % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
2455 % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
2456 % This is a subroutine for that.
2459 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2460 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2462 % Switch to typewriter.
2465 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2466 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2468 % Turn off hyphenation.
2475 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2478 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2479 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2480 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2482 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2483 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2484 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2485 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
2488 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2489 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2490 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
2492 \global\def\code{\begingroup
2493 \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2494 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2495 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
2507 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2510 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2512 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2513 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2514 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2515 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2517 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2518 \else\normalunderscore \fi
2519 \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2523 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2524 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
2525 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
2526 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
2528 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2530 \def\keywordtrue{true}
2531 \def\keywordfalse{false}
2533 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2535 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2536 \allowcodebreakstrue
2537 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2538 \allowcodebreaksfalse
2540 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2541 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
2545 % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
2546 % so use \code rather than \samp.
2552 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2553 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2554 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2555 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2556 % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
2558 \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
2559 \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2562 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2564 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2566 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2569 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2571 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2574 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2580 % This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
2581 \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
2582 \let\uref=\urefbreak
2583 \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
2584 \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
2587 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2589 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2591 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2594 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2596 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2599 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
2605 % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
2607 \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
2608 \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
2609 \catcode\slashChar=\active
2614 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
2615 \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2625 % By default, they are just regular characters.
2626 \global\def&{\normalamp}
2627 \global\def.{\normaldot}
2628 \global\def#{\normalhash}
2629 \global\def?{\normalquest}
2630 \global\def/{\normalslash}
2633 % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
2634 % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
2635 % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
2636 \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
2637 \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
2639 \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
2640 \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
2641 \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
2642 \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
2643 \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
2646 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
2647 \urefprestretch \slashChar
2648 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
2649 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
2650 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
2654 % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
2655 % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
2656 % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
2658 \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
2660 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
2661 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2662 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
2663 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2664 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
2665 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
2667 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2668 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2671 \def\wordafter{after}
2672 \def\wordbefore{before}
2675 \urefbreakstyle after
2677 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2681 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2682 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2684 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2686 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2687 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2690 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2691 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2698 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2699 % then @kbd has no effect.
2700 \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
2702 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2703 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2704 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2705 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2707 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2708 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2709 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2710 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2711 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2712 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2714 \errhelp = \EMsimple
2715 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2718 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
2719 \def\wordexample{example}
2722 % Default is `distinct'.
2723 \kbdinputstyle distinct
2726 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2727 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2728 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2729 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
2731 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
2732 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2734 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2735 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2736 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2737 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2738 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2739 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2741 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
2742 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
2743 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2745 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
2747 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2750 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2751 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2753 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
2754 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2757 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
2758 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2760 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2762 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2763 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
2764 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
2765 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2767 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2768 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2771 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2772 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2773 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2775 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2776 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2778 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2781 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2782 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2784 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2785 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2786 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2788 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2789 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2791 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2794 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
2798 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2800 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
2801 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
2802 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
2803 % which is what @var uses.
2805 \catcode`\_ = \active
2806 \gdef\mathunderscore{%
2808 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
2811 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
2812 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
2813 % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
2815 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
2816 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
2821 \let\\ = \mathbackslash
2823 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
2835 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
2837 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
2838 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
2839 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
2842 \catcode`^ = \active
2843 \catcode`< = \active
2844 \catcode`> = \active
2845 \catcode`+ = \active
2846 \catcode`' = \active
2852 \let' = \ptexquoteright
2856 % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
2857 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2859 % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
2860 % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
2861 % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
2863 \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
2865 \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
2866 \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
2867 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
2868 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2870 % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
2871 % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
2872 % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
2873 % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
2874 % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
2875 % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
2876 % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
2878 \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
2879 \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
2880 \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
2881 \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
2882 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2883 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
2890 % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
2894 % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
2895 % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
2896 % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
2897 \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
2898 \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
2899 \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
2900 \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
2902 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
2903 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
2904 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
2905 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
2906 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
2907 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
2908 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
2909 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
2910 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
2913 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
2916 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
2917 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
2919 \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
2920 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
2921 \let\tieaccent = \ptext
2922 \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
2923 \let\udotaccent = \d
2925 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
2926 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
2927 \def\questiondown{?`}
2929 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
2930 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
2932 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
2937 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
2938 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
2939 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
2943 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
2944 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
2946 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
2948 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
2949 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
2950 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
2951 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
2952 % \scriptscriptstyle).
2957 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
2958 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
2959 % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
2960 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
2961 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
2963 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
2964 \selectfonts\lllsize A%
2973 % Some math mode symbols.
2974 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
2975 \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
2976 \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
2977 \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
2979 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
2980 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
2981 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
2982 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
2983 % whichever is larger.
2987 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
2994 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
2995 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2996 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2997 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
3001 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
3005 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
3008 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3010 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3011 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3014 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
3015 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
3016 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
3017 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
3018 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
3020 % The @error{} command.
3021 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3025 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
3026 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
3027 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3028 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
3030 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
3031 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
3032 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
3034 \hrule height\dimen2
3035 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
3036 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
3037 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
3038 \hrule height\dimen2}
3041 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
3043 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3045 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
3047 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3048 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3049 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3050 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3051 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3053 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3054 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3060 % feybo - bold slanted
3062 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3063 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3066 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3070 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
3072 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3073 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3074 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3077 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3078 % that to the current nominal size.
3080 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3081 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3083 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3085 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3087 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
3090 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
3095 % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3096 % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3099 % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3100 \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
3101 \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
3102 \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
3103 \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
3105 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
3106 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3107 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
3108 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3109 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
3110 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
3111 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
3112 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
3114 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3115 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
3116 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3117 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3119 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3120 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3124 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3125 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3126 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3127 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3129 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
3130 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
3131 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
3136 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
3137 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
3138 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
3139 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
3141 % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
3143 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3144 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3145 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3146 % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3147 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
3148 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3151 \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3153 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3155 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3158 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3164 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
3165 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3166 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3168 \def\registeredsymbol{%
3169 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
3174 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3176 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
3178 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3179 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
3180 % so we'll define it if necessary.
3182 \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3183 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3187 \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
3188 \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3189 \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3190 \chardef\quoteright=`\'
3193 \message{page headings,}
3195 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3196 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3198 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3200 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3202 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3203 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3205 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3206 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3207 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3208 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3210 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3211 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3212 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3215 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3217 \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3218 % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3219 \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3220 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3221 \finishedtitlepagetrue
3223 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3224 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3225 \let\oldpage = \page
3227 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3230 \let\page = \oldpage
3237 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3240 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3241 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3242 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3243 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3247 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3248 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3251 % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3252 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3255 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3256 \global\let\contents = \relax
3259 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3261 \global\let\contents = \relax
3262 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3266 \def\finishtitlepage{%
3267 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3268 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3269 \finishedtitlepagetrue
3272 % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
3273 % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
3274 % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
3275 % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold.
3277 \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
3279 \hyphenpenalty=10000
3285 % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3287 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
3288 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3290 \parseargdef\title{%
3292 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1}
3293 % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3294 \finishedtitlepagefalse
3295 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3298 \parseargdef\subtitle{%
3300 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3303 % @author should come last, but may come many times.
3304 % It can also be used inside @quotation.
3306 \parseargdef\author{%
3307 \def\temp{\quotation}%
3309 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3312 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3313 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3318 % Set up page headings and footings.
3320 \let\thispage=\folio
3322 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
3323 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
3324 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
3325 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
3327 % Now make TeX use those variables
3328 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3329 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3330 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3331 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3332 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3334 % Commands to set those variables.
3335 % For example, this is what @headings on does
3336 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3337 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3338 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
3339 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3342 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3343 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3344 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3345 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3347 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3348 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3349 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3350 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3352 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3354 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3355 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3356 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3357 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3359 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3360 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3361 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3362 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3364 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
3365 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3366 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
3367 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3370 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3372 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3373 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3375 % The same set of arguments for:
3380 % @everyheadingmarks
3381 % @everyfootingmarks
3383 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3384 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3385 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3386 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3387 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3388 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3389 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3390 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3391 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3392 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3393 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3394 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3397 \everyheadingmarks bottom
3398 \everyfootingmarks bottom
3400 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3401 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3402 % @headings off turns them off.
3403 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3404 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3405 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3406 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3407 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3408 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3410 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3412 \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3413 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
3414 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
3417 \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3418 \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
3420 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3421 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3422 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3423 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3424 % edge of all pages.
3425 \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3427 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3428 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3429 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3430 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3431 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3433 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3435 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3436 % page number on top right.
3437 \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3439 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3440 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3441 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3442 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3443 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3445 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3447 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
3448 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3449 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3450 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3451 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3452 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3453 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3454 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3457 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
3458 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3459 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3460 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3461 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3462 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3463 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3466 % Subroutines used in generating headings
3467 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3468 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3469 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3470 \ifx\today\thisisundefined
3474 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3475 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3476 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3481 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3482 % It generates no output of its own.
3483 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3484 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3488 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3490 % default indentation of table text
3491 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
3492 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3493 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
3494 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3495 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
3497 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3500 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3502 % They also define \itemindex
3503 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3505 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3507 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3509 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3510 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3512 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3513 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
3514 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
3515 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3517 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3519 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3520 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3521 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3522 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3523 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3524 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
3526 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3527 % but leave it ragged-right.
3529 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
3530 \advance\hsize by\tableindent
3531 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
3532 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3535 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3536 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3537 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
3539 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
3540 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3541 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3542 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
3543 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3544 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
3548 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3550 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
3551 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3553 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3554 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3555 % eventually be printed.
3556 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
3557 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
3559 \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3561 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3565 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
3566 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
3568 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3570 \let\itemindex\gobble
3574 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
3575 \tablecheck{ftable}%
3578 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
3579 \tablecheck{vtable}%
3582 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
3584 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3585 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
3586 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3593 \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3598 \makevalueexpandable
3599 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3603 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3605 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
3606 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
3607 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
3608 \itemmax=\tableindent
3609 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
3610 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
3611 \exdentamount=\tableindent
3613 \parskip = \smallskipamount
3614 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3615 \let\item = \internalBitem
3616 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
3618 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3621 \let\Eitemize\Etable
3622 \let\Eenumerate\Etable
3624 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3628 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3632 \itemmax=\itemindent
3633 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
3634 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3635 \exdentamount=\itemindent
3637 \parskip=\smallskipamount
3638 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3640 % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
3641 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3642 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
3643 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
3644 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3645 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3646 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
3648 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3649 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3651 \let\item=\itemizeitem
3654 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3657 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
3658 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3660 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3661 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3662 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
3663 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
3664 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3665 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3666 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
3667 % that's the theory.
3668 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
3670 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3672 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
3676 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3677 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3679 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3681 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3682 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
3683 % argument is the same as `1'.
3685 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
3686 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3687 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3689 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3691 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
3692 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3693 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3694 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3695 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3696 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3698 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
3699 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3700 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3701 % not equal to itself.
3702 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3704 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3705 % continuing to look for a <number>.
3707 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
3708 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3711 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
3712 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3714 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3718 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
3723 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
3726 \def\numericenumerate{%
3728 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3731 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3732 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3733 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3735 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3737 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3744 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3745 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3746 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3748 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3750 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3757 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3758 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
3759 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3761 \def\startenumeration#1{%
3762 \advance\itemno by -1
3763 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
3766 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3769 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
3770 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
3771 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3772 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3775 % @multitable macros
3776 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3778 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3779 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
3780 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3781 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3783 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
3787 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
3788 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
3791 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
3792 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
3793 % columns as desired.
3796 % Or use a template:
3797 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3799 % using the widest term desired in each column.
3801 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
3802 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
3803 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
3804 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
3806 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
3809 % Sample multitable:
3811 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3812 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
3819 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
3820 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
3822 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
3823 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
3826 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
3827 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
3828 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
3829 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
3830 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
3832 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
3834 \newskip\multitableparskip
3835 \newskip\multitableparindent
3836 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
3837 \newskip\multitablelinespace
3838 \multitableparskip=0pt
3839 \multitableparindent=6pt
3840 \multitablecolspace=12pt
3841 \multitablelinespace=0pt
3843 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
3845 \let\endsetuptable\relax
3846 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
3847 \let\columnfractions\relax
3848 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
3851 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
3852 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
3854 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
3855 \global\advance\colcount by 1
3856 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
3863 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
3866 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
3867 \global\setpercenttrue
3870 \let\go\pickupwholefraction
3872 \global\advance\colcount by 1
3873 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
3874 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
3875 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
3878 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
3879 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
3880 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
3881 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
3883 \let\go = \setuptable
3889 % multitable-only commands.
3891 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3892 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3893 % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
3894 % undo it ourselves.
3895 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
3897 \checkenv\multitable
3899 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
3900 \the\everytab % for the first item
3903 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
3904 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
3905 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
3906 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3907 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3909 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3911 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
3913 \envdef\multitable{%
3917 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3918 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3919 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3920 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3925 \setmultitablespacing
3926 \parskip=\multitableparskip
3927 \parindent=\multitableparindent
3933 \global\everytab={}%
3934 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3935 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3937 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3939 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3940 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
3941 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3945 \parsearg\domultitable
3947 \def\domultitable#1{%
3948 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
3949 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
3951 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
3952 % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
3953 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
3954 % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
3956 \global\advance\colcount by 1
3959 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
3960 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
3962 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
3963 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
3966 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
3967 % to the width of each template entry.
3969 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
3970 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
3971 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
3972 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
3974 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
3977 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
3978 \advance\hsize by\leftskip
3981 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
3982 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
3983 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
3985 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
3986 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
3988 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
3989 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
3990 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
3992 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
3994 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
3995 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
3996 % marking characters.
3997 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
4002 \egroup % end the \halign
4003 \global\setpercentfalse
4006 \def\setmultitablespacing{%
4007 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
4009 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
4010 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
4011 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
4012 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
4013 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
4014 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
4015 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
4017 % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
4018 % table. If not, do nothing.
4019 % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
4020 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
4021 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4022 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4023 % than skip between lines in the table.
4025 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
4026 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4027 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4028 % than skip between lines in the table.
4032 \message{conditionals,}
4034 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
4035 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
4036 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
4037 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4038 % attempt to close an environment group.
4041 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
4042 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
4045 \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
4046 \makecond{ifnothtml}
4047 \makecond{ifnotinfo}
4048 \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
4051 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4053 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
4054 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
4055 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
4056 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
4057 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
4058 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
4059 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
4060 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
4061 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
4062 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
4063 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
4064 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
4065 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
4067 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4069 % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4070 \newcount\doignorecount
4072 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4073 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4075 \catcode`\@ = \other
4076 \catcode`\{ = \other
4077 \catcode`\} = \other
4079 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4082 % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4085 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4089 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4092 \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4093 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4095 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4096 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
4097 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
4099 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4100 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4101 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4102 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
4104 % And now expand that command.
4109 \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4111 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
4112 \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4113 \else % Found a nested condition, ...
4114 \advance\doignorecount by 1
4115 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
4116 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4118 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4121 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4123 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4124 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
4125 \let\next\enddoignore
4126 \else % Still inside a nested condition.
4127 \advance\doignorecount by -1
4128 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
4133 % Finish off ignored text.
4135 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4136 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4137 % would result in a blank line in the output.
4138 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4142 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4143 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4145 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4146 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4147 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4149 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4151 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4152 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4154 \makevalueexpandable
4156 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
4164 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4165 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4167 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4169 \parseargdef\clear{%
4171 \makevalueexpandable
4172 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
4176 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4177 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4178 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4180 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
4182 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4183 \let\value = \expandablevalue
4184 % We don't want these characters active, ...
4185 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
4186 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4187 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4188 % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4189 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
4193 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
4194 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
4195 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
4196 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
4197 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
4198 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
4199 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
4201 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
4202 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4203 {[No value for ``#1'']}%
4204 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
4206 \csname SET#1\endcsname
4210 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4213 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
4216 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4219 \makevalueexpandable
4221 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4222 #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4227 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4229 % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
4230 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4232 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4233 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4234 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4237 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4238 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4240 % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
4241 % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
4242 % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
4243 % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
4245 \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
4246 \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
4248 \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
4249 \makevalueexpandable
4251 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
4252 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
4257 \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
4259 % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handlded similar to @ifclear above.
4260 \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
4261 \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
4262 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
4263 \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
4265 % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
4266 % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
4267 \set txicommandconditionals
4269 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
4270 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
4271 \let\dircategory=\comment
4273 % @defininfoenclose.
4274 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
4278 % Index generation facilities
4280 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4281 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4282 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4284 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
4285 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
4286 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
4287 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4288 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
4289 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4290 % for the sake of vms.
4294 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4295 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
4297 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
4298 \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4301 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
4303 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4305 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4307 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4309 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
4311 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4312 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
4314 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4315 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4319 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
4320 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4322 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4325 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4326 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4328 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4329 % #3 the target index (bar).
4330 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4331 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4332 % closing the target index.
4333 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
4334 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4335 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4336 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
4337 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
4339 % redefine \fooindfile:
4340 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4341 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4342 % redefine \fooindex:
4343 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4346 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
4347 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4348 % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
4350 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
4351 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
4353 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4354 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4356 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
4357 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4359 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4360 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
4361 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4363 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4364 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
4365 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
4368 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
4369 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4370 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
4372 % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
4373 % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
4374 % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4375 % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4376 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
4377 % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
4378 \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
4379 \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
4381 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
4382 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
4383 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
4384 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
4385 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
4386 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
4387 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
4388 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
4389 % is still getting written without apparent harm.
4391 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
4392 % help-texinfo, 22may06):
4393 % @macro funindex {WORD}
4397 % @funindex commtest
4399 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
4401 % Sample whatsit resulting:
4402 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
4405 \let\endinput = \empty
4407 % Do the redefinitions.
4411 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
4412 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4413 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
4414 % this will be simpler.
4419 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
4420 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
4422 % Do the redefinitions.
4427 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4429 \def\commondummies{%
4431 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4432 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
4433 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4434 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4435 % from whatever follows.
4437 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4440 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4441 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4442 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4444 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
4445 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
4446 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4448 \commondummiesnofonts
4450 \definedummyletter\_%
4451 \definedummyletter\-%
4453 % Non-English letters.
4464 \definedummyword\exclamdown
4468 \definedummyword\ordf
4469 \definedummyword\ordm
4470 \definedummyword\questiondown
4474 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4476 \definedummyword\gtr
4477 \definedummyword\hat
4478 \definedummyword\less
4481 \definedummyword\tclose
4484 \definedummyword\LaTeX
4485 \definedummyword\TeX
4487 % Assorted special characters.
4488 \definedummyword\arrow
4489 \definedummyword\bullet
4490 \definedummyword\comma
4491 \definedummyword\copyright
4492 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4493 \definedummyword\dots
4494 \definedummyword\enddots
4495 \definedummyword\entrybreak
4496 \definedummyword\equiv
4497 \definedummyword\error
4498 \definedummyword\euro
4499 \definedummyword\expansion
4500 \definedummyword\geq
4501 \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4502 \definedummyword\guillemetright
4503 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4504 \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4505 \definedummyword\lbracechar
4506 \definedummyword\leq
4507 \definedummyword\minus
4508 \definedummyword\ogonek
4509 \definedummyword\pounds
4510 \definedummyword\point
4511 \definedummyword\print
4512 \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4513 \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4514 \definedummyword\quotedblright
4515 \definedummyword\quoteleft
4516 \definedummyword\quoteright
4517 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4518 \definedummyword\rbracechar
4519 \definedummyword\result
4520 \definedummyword\textdegree
4522 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4525 \normalturnoffactive
4527 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4528 % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4529 \makevalueexpandable
4532 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4534 \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4535 % Control letters and accents.
4536 \definedummyletter\!%
4537 \definedummyaccent\"%
4538 \definedummyaccent\'%
4539 \definedummyletter\*%
4540 \definedummyaccent\,%
4541 \definedummyletter\.%
4542 \definedummyletter\/%
4543 \definedummyletter\:%
4544 \definedummyaccent\=%
4545 \definedummyletter\?%
4546 \definedummyaccent\^%
4547 \definedummyaccent\`%
4548 \definedummyaccent\~%
4552 \definedummyword\dotaccent
4553 \definedummyword\ogonek
4554 \definedummyword\ringaccent
4555 \definedummyword\tieaccent
4556 \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4557 \definedummyword\udotaccent
4558 \definedummyword\dotless
4560 % Texinfo font commands.
4564 \definedummyword\sansserif
4566 \definedummyword\slanted
4569 % Commands that take arguments.
4570 \definedummyword\abbr
4571 \definedummyword\acronym
4572 \definedummyword\anchor
4573 \definedummyword\cite
4574 \definedummyword\code
4575 \definedummyword\command
4576 \definedummyword\dfn
4577 \definedummyword\dmn
4578 \definedummyword\email
4579 \definedummyword\emph
4580 \definedummyword\env
4581 \definedummyword\file
4582 \definedummyword\image
4583 \definedummyword\indicateurl
4584 \definedummyword\inforef
4585 \definedummyword\kbd
4586 \definedummyword\key
4587 \definedummyword\math
4588 \definedummyword\option
4589 \definedummyword\pxref
4590 \definedummyword\ref
4591 \definedummyword\samp
4592 \definedummyword\strong
4593 \definedummyword\tie
4594 \definedummyword\uref
4595 \definedummyword\url
4596 \definedummyword\var
4597 \definedummyword\verb
4599 \definedummyword\xref
4602 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4603 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
4604 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4605 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4608 % Accent commands should become @asis.
4609 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
4610 % We can just ignore other control letters.
4611 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
4612 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
4613 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4615 \commondummiesnofonts
4617 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4618 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4619 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4624 \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4625 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
4627 % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
4628 % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
4629 % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
4631 \def\lbracechar{|a}%
4634 \def\rbracechar{|b}%
4636 % Non-English letters.
4653 \def\questiondown{?}%
4660 % Assorted special characters.
4661 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4663 \def\bullet{bullet}%
4665 \def\copyright{copyright}%
4671 \def\expansion{==>}%
4673 \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
4674 \def\guillemetright{>>}%
4675 \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
4676 \def\guilsinglright{>}%
4680 \def\pounds{pounds}%
4682 \def\quotedblbase{"}%
4683 \def\quotedblleft{"}%
4684 \def\quotedblright{"}%
4687 \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
4688 \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
4692 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
4693 \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
4695 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4696 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4697 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4698 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4699 % that starts with \.
4701 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4702 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
4703 % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4708 % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
4709 % ignore left quotes in the sort term.
4710 {\catcode`\`=\active
4711 \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
4713 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
4714 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4716 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4717 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4718 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4720 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
4721 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4722 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4723 % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4725 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4728 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4730 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4732 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4733 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4736 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
4738 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4743 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
4745 \def\dosubindwrite{%
4746 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
4747 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
4748 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
4751 % Remember, we are within a group.
4752 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
4753 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
4754 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
4756 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
4757 % get the string to sort by.
4759 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
4760 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
4763 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
4764 % the original text, including any font commands. We write
4765 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
4766 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
4770 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
4775 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
4777 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
4778 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
4779 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
4780 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
4781 % sequences like this:
4785 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
4786 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
4787 % the previous defun.
4789 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
4790 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
4792 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
4794 % But wait, there is a catch there:
4795 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
4796 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
4797 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
4798 % representation of the skip.
4800 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
4801 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
4803 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
4805 \newskip\whatsitskip
4806 \newcount\whatsitpenalty
4810 \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
4813 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
4814 \whatsitskip = \lastskip
4815 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
4816 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
4818 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
4819 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
4820 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
4821 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
4822 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
4823 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4830 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4831 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
4832 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
4833 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
4834 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
4835 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
4836 % @deffn deffn-whatever
4837 % @vindex index-whatever
4839 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
4840 % and the "Description." paragraph.
4841 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
4843 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
4844 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
4845 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
4846 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
4850 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
4851 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
4853 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
4854 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
4855 % containing these kinds of lines:
4857 % before the first topic whose initial is c
4858 % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
4859 % for a topic that is used without subtopics
4861 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
4862 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
4863 % for each subtopic.
4865 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
4866 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
4868 \def\findex {\fnindex}
4869 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
4870 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
4871 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
4872 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
4873 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
4875 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
4877 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
4878 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
4880 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
4882 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
4883 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
4885 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
4886 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
4891 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
4893 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
4894 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
4896 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
4897 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
4899 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
4901 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
4902 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
4903 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
4904 % there is some text.
4905 \putwordIndexNonexistent
4908 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
4909 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
4910 % it can discover if there is anything in it.
4913 \putwordIndexIsEmpty
4915 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
4916 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
4917 % to make right now.
4918 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
4929 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
4930 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
4933 % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
4934 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
4936 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
4939 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
4941 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
4943 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
4945 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
4946 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
4947 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
4948 % we need before each entry, but it's better.
4950 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
4951 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
4952 \leftline{\secbf #1}%
4953 % Do our best not to break after the initial.
4955 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
4958 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
4959 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
4960 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
4962 % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
4963 % \def\entry#1#2{...
4964 % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
4965 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
4966 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
4967 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
4972 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
4973 % affect previous text.
4976 % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
4979 % No extra space above this paragraph.
4982 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
4983 \finalhyphendemerits = 0
4985 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
4986 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
4987 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
4988 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
4989 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
4991 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
4992 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
4995 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
4997 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
4999 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
5003 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
5004 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
5005 % titles, for instance.
5006 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5007 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
5009 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
5010 \afterassignment\doentry
5013 \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5015 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
5017 \aftergroup\finishentry
5018 % And now comes the text of the entry.
5020 \def\finishentry#1{%
5021 % #1 is the page number.
5023 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
5024 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
5025 % cursed by a Unix daemon.
5026 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
5027 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
5031 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
5032 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
5033 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
5035 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
5037 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
5038 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
5051 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
5052 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
5053 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
5055 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
5057 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
5058 \def\secondary#1#2{{%
5063 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
5065 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
5072 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5073 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5074 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5078 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5080 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5081 % Grab any single-column material above us.
5084 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
5085 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
5086 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
5087 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
5088 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
5089 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
5090 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
5091 \ifvoid\partialpage \else
5092 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
5095 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
5096 % Unvbox the main output page.
5098 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5101 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5103 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5104 \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
5106 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
5107 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5108 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
5109 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5110 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5112 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5113 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5114 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
5115 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5116 % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5118 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
5119 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5122 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
5123 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
5124 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
5125 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5127 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
5128 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
5132 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5135 \def\doublecolumnout{%
5136 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
5137 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5138 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5142 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
5144 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5145 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
5146 \onepageout\pagesofar
5148 \penalty\outputpenalty
5151 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5152 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5156 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5157 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
5158 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
5161 % All done with double columns.
5162 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
5163 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5164 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
5165 % following situation:
5167 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5168 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5169 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
5170 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5171 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
5172 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5173 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5174 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5175 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5176 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5177 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
5178 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5179 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5180 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5181 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5182 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5183 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5184 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
5185 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5187 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5188 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5192 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
5193 % current page, no automatic page break.
5196 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
5197 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
5198 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5199 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5200 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
5201 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
5202 % the output somewhat more palatable.)
5203 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
5206 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5208 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5209 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
5210 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
5211 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
5215 % Called at the end of the double column material.
5216 \def\balancecolumns{%
5217 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5219 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
5220 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
5221 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
5222 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
5223 \splittopskip = \topskip
5224 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
5228 \global\setbox3 = \copy0
5229 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
5231 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
5234 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
5235 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
5236 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
5240 \catcode`\@ = \other
5243 \message{sectioning,}
5244 % Chapters, sections, etc.
5246 % Let's start with @part.
5247 \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5251 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
5253 \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
5254 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
5255 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5256 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
5261 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
5262 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5263 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
5264 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
5265 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5266 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
5268 \newcount\secno \secno=0
5269 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
5270 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
5272 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5273 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
5275 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5276 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5277 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5278 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5280 \def\appendixletter{%
5281 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
5282 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
5283 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
5284 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
5285 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
5286 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
5287 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
5288 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
5289 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
5290 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5291 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5292 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5293 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5294 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5295 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5296 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5297 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5298 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5299 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5300 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5301 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5302 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5303 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5304 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5305 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5306 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5307 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5308 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
5309 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5310 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5311 \else\char\the\appendixno
5312 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5313 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5315 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5316 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
5317 % these. @section does likewise.
5319 \def\thischapternum{}
5320 \def\thischaptername{}
5322 \def\thissectionnum{}
5323 \def\thissectionname{}
5325 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5326 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5328 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5329 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
5330 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
5332 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5333 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
5334 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
5336 % we only have subsub.
5337 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
5339 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5340 % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5341 \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
5343 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5344 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5345 \def\chapheadtype{N}
5347 % Choose a heading macro
5348 % #1 is heading type
5349 % #2 is heading level
5350 % #3 is text for heading
5351 \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5352 % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5354 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
5355 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5356 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
5359 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
5366 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
5367 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
5370 % Check for appendix sections:
5371 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
5372 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5374 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
5375 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
5378 % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5379 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
5382 \chardef\unnlevel = 3
5385 % Now print the heading:
5389 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5390 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5391 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5397 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5398 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5399 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5405 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5406 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5410 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5414 \def\numhead{\genhead N}
5415 \def\apphead{\genhead A}
5416 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
5418 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
5419 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5421 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5422 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5423 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5425 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5427 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5428 % as an @include file.
5429 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5430 \global\advance\chapno by 1
5433 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
5436 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5437 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5438 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5440 % Write the actual heading.
5441 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
5443 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5444 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
5445 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5446 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5449 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5451 \def\appendixzzz#1{%
5452 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5453 \global\advance\appendixno by 1
5454 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
5457 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5458 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5459 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5461 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
5463 \global\let\section = \appendixsec
5464 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
5465 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
5468 % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
5469 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
5470 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5471 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5472 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
5474 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5475 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5478 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5479 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5480 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5481 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5482 % to be executed, not expanded).
5484 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5485 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
5486 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
5487 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
5490 \message{(\the\toks0)}%
5492 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
5494 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
5495 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
5496 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
5499 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
5500 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
5501 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
5502 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
5503 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
5504 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
5506 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5509 % @top is like @unnumbered.
5514 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
5516 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5517 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
5520 % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
5521 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
5522 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
5523 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5524 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
5526 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
5528 % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
5529 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
5530 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
5531 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5532 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
5537 % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
5538 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
5539 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
5540 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5541 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5544 % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
5545 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
5546 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
5547 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5548 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
5549 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5552 % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
5553 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
5554 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
5555 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5556 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
5557 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5562 % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
5563 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
5564 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5565 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5566 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
5567 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5570 % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
5571 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
5572 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
5573 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5574 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
5575 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5578 % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
5579 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
5580 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5581 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5582 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
5583 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5586 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
5587 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
5588 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
5589 \let\section = \numberedsec
5590 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5591 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5593 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
5595 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
5596 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
5597 % overlong headings to fold.
5598 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
5599 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
5600 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
5601 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
5604 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
5605 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
5608 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
5609 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
5610 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5611 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5612 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
5613 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
5614 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5617 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
5618 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5619 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5620 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5621 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5622 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5623 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5625 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
5626 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
5627 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
5629 % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
5630 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
5632 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
5633 \newskip\chapheadingskip
5635 % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
5636 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
5637 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
5638 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
5639 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
5640 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
5652 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
5655 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5656 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
5657 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
5660 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5661 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
5662 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
5663 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
5666 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
5667 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
5668 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
5669 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
5675 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
5676 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
5678 % To test against our argument.
5679 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
5680 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
5681 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
5683 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
5684 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5685 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5686 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5687 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5688 \gdef\thissection{}}%
5691 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5692 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5693 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
5694 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5695 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5696 \gdef\thischapter{}}%
5697 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5699 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5700 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5701 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
5702 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
5703 % commands in some of the translations.
5704 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
5705 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5706 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5710 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5711 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5712 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
5713 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
5714 % commands in some of the translations.
5715 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
5716 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5717 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5721 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5722 % the preceding space.
5725 % Insert the chapter heading break.
5728 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5729 % between here and the heading.
5730 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5731 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5735 \chapfonts \rmisbold
5737 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
5738 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
5739 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
5740 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5742 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
5743 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
5744 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5746 \def\toctype{unnchap}%
5747 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5748 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
5750 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5751 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
5754 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
5755 \def\toctype{numchap}%
5758 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
5759 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
5760 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
5761 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
5763 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
5764 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
5765 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
5766 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
5767 % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
5770 % Typeset the actual heading.
5771 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
5772 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5773 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
5776 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
5780 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
5781 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5782 \def\centerparameters{%
5783 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
5784 \leftskip = \rightskip
5789 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
5790 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
5792 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
5794 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
5795 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5796 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
5797 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5799 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
5800 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
5803 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
5804 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
5806 \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
5809 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
5810 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
5813 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
5814 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
5816 \newskip\secheadingskip
5817 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
5819 % Subsection titles.
5820 \newskip\subsecheadingskip
5821 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
5823 % Subsubsection titles.
5824 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
5825 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
5828 % Print any size, any type, section title.
5830 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
5831 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
5834 \def\seckeyword{sec}
5836 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
5838 \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
5840 % Switch to the right set of fonts.
5841 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
5843 \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
5846 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5847 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5848 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5849 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5850 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5851 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
5853 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5854 % Don't redefine \thissection.
5855 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5856 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5858 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5859 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5860 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5861 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5862 % commands in some of the translations.
5863 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5864 \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5865 \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5869 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5871 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5872 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5873 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5874 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5875 % commands in some of the translations.
5876 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5877 \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5878 \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5883 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
5884 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
5885 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
5888 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5889 % the preceding space.
5892 % Insert space above the heading.
5893 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
5895 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5896 % between here and the heading.
5897 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5900 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
5901 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5904 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5905 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5906 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
5907 % and don't redefine \lastsection.
5910 \let\sectionlevel=\empty
5911 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5912 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5914 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5916 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5918 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5921 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
5922 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
5924 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
5925 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
5928 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
5929 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
5930 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
5931 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
5932 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
5933 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
5936 % Output the actual section heading.
5937 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5938 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
5941 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
5942 % Don't allow stretch, though.
5943 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
5945 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
5946 % was followed by glue.
5949 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
5950 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
5951 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
5952 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
5953 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
5954 % obscuring the section heading with something else.
5957 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
5958 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
5959 % and do the needful.
5965 % Table of contents.
5968 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
5969 % Called from @chapter, etc.
5971 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
5972 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
5973 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
5974 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
5975 % destination to jump to.
5977 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
5978 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
5979 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
5980 % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
5982 \newif\iftocfileopened
5983 \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
5985 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
5986 \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
5987 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
5988 \iftocfileopened\else
5989 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
5990 \global\tocfileopenedtrue
5996 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
6002 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
6003 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
6004 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
6005 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
6006 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
6007 % `1', and two named `2'.
6008 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
6012 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
6013 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
6014 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
6016 \def\activecatcodes{%
6029 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
6033 \input \tocreadfilename
6036 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
6037 \newcount\savepageno
6038 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
6040 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
6042 \def\startcontents#1{%
6043 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
6044 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
6045 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
6046 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
6048 \immediate\closeout\tocfile
6050 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
6051 % It is abundantly clear what they are.
6052 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
6054 \savepageno = \pageno
6055 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
6056 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
6057 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
6059 % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6060 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
6063 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
6064 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6066 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
6068 % Normal (long) toc.
6071 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6072 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6077 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6083 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6084 \global\pageno = \savepageno
6087 % And just the chapters.
6088 \def\summarycontents{%
6089 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6091 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
6092 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
6093 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
6094 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
6095 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6097 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
6098 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
6100 \hyphenpenalty = 10000
6101 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
6102 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
6103 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
6104 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
6105 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6106 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6107 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6108 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6109 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6110 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6111 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6117 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6119 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6120 \global\pageno = \savepageno
6122 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
6124 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6125 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6127 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6128 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6129 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6130 % But use \hss just in case.
6131 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
6132 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
6134 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6135 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
6136 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6137 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6138 % there are before deciding ...
6139 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
6142 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
6143 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
6144 % The last argument is the page number.
6145 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
6147 % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
6148 % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6149 % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6150 \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
6151 \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
6153 % Parts, in the short toc.
6154 \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6156 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
6157 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6160 % Chapters, in the main contents.
6161 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6163 % Chapters, in the short toc.
6164 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
6165 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6166 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
6169 % Appendices, in the main contents.
6170 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6172 \def\appendixbox#1{%
6173 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6174 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
6175 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6177 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6179 % Unnumbered chapters.
6180 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
6181 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
6184 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6185 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
6186 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
6189 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6190 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
6191 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6193 % And subsubsections.
6194 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6195 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
6196 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6198 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6199 % Same as \defaultparindent.
6200 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
6202 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
6205 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6206 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6207 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
6208 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
6211 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6213 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
6216 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6217 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
6218 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6221 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6222 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
6223 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6226 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6227 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
6228 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6231 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
6232 \let\tocentry = \entry
6234 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
6235 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
6237 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6238 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6240 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
6241 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
6242 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6243 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6246 \message{environments,}
6247 % @foo ... @end foo.
6249 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
6250 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
6251 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
6254 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
6255 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
6256 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
6257 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
6268 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
6269 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
6273 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
6278 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
6281 \let\indent=\ptexindent
6282 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6289 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
6290 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
6292 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
6293 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
6296 % There is no need to define \Etex.
6298 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
6299 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
6300 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
6302 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
6303 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
6305 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
6306 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
6308 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
6310 % This space is always present above and below environments.
6311 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
6313 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
6314 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
6315 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
6316 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
6318 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
6319 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6320 % \sectionheading, q.v.
6321 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
6322 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
6324 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
6326 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6328 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
6329 \vskip\envskipamount
6334 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
6336 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6337 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6338 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
6340 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6341 % environment contents.
6342 \font\circle=lcircle10
6344 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6345 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6346 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
6348 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6349 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
6350 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
6351 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
6352 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6353 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
6355 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6356 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
6359 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6362 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6364 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
6365 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
6366 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
6367 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
6369 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
6370 % side, and for 6pt waste from
6371 % each corner char, and rule thickness
6372 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
6373 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
6374 \let\nonarrowing = t%
6376 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
6377 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
6378 % collide with the section heading.
6379 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
6382 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
6390 \baselineskip=\normbskip
6391 \lineskip=\normlskip
6394 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
6409 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6411 \newdimen\nonfillparindent
6414 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
6415 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6416 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6417 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6419 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6420 % the normal \indent.
6421 \nonfillparindent=\parindent
6423 \let\indent\nonfillindent
6425 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6426 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6427 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6428 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
6430 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6432 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
6437 % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6438 % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6439 % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6441 \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6442 \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6444 \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6446 \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6450 \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6451 \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6453 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6454 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6455 % This affects the following displayed environments:
6456 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6458 \def\smallword{small}
6459 \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
6460 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
6461 \def\setnormaldispenv{%
6462 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
6463 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
6464 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
6465 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
6466 % to change the fonts afterward.
6467 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6468 \smallexamplefonts \rm
6471 \def\setsmalldispenv{%
6472 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
6474 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6475 \smallexamplefonts \rm
6479 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
6480 % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
6481 \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
6482 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
6483 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
6484 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6485 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6488 % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
6489 \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
6490 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
6491 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
6494 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
6495 % @example: same as @lisp.
6497 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
6498 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
6500 \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
6502 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
6503 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
6504 \gobble % eat return
6506 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
6508 \makedispenvdef{display}{%
6513 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
6515 \makedispenvdef{format}{%
6516 \let\nonarrowing = t%
6521 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
6523 \let\nonarrowing = t%
6527 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
6531 \envdef\flushright{%
6532 \let\nonarrowing = t%
6534 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
6537 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
6540 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
6541 % justification. From plain.tex.
6542 \envdef\raggedright{%
6543 \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
6545 \let\Eraggedright\par
6547 \envdef\raggedleft{%
6548 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
6549 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6550 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6551 % badness reporting.
6553 \let\Eraggedleft\par
6555 \envdef\raggedcenter{%
6556 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
6557 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6558 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6559 % badness reporting.
6561 \let\Eraggedcenter\par
6564 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
6565 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
6566 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
6567 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
6569 \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
6571 \def\quotationstart{%
6572 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
6575 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
6576 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6577 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6578 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
6579 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
6581 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6583 \parsearg\quotationlabel
6586 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
6587 % doing normal filling.
6591 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
6593 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
6595 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6597 \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
6599 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
6600 \def\quotationlabel#1{%
6602 \ifx\temp\empty \else
6608 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
6609 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
6610 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
6611 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
6613 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
6615 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
6616 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
6619 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
6620 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
6621 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
6622 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
6623 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
6624 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
6629 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
6630 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
6632 % Setup for the @verb command.
6634 % Eight spaces for a tab
6636 \catcode`\^^I=\active
6637 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
6641 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6642 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
6643 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
6645 % Respect line breaks,
6646 % print special symbols as themselves, and
6647 % make each space count
6648 % must do in this order:
6649 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6652 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
6654 % Real tab expansion.
6655 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
6657 % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
6658 % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
6659 % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
6660 % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
6661 % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
6662 % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
6664 \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
6667 \catcode`\^^I=\active
6669 \catcode`\^^I=\active
6670 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
6671 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
6672 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
6673 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
6674 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
6675 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
6680 % start the verbatim environment.
6681 \def\setupverbatim{%
6682 \let\nonarrowing = t%
6684 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6685 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
6686 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
6687 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
6689 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
6690 % Respect line breaks,
6691 % print special symbols as themselves, and
6692 % make each space count.
6693 % Must do in this order:
6694 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6695 \everypar{\starttabbox}%
6698 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
6699 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
6700 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
6702 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
6704 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
6706 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
6707 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
6710 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
6713 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
6714 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
6716 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
6718 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
6719 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
6720 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
6722 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
6727 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
6728 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
6729 % line in the output.
6730 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
6731 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
6732 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
6736 \setupverbatim\doverbatim
6738 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
6741 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
6743 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
6745 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
6747 \makevalueexpandable
6749 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
6750 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
6756 % @copying ... @end copying.
6757 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
6759 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
6760 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
6761 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
6762 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
6763 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
6764 % possible is very desirable.
6766 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
6767 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
6769 \def\insertcopying{%
6771 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
6772 \scanexp\copyingtext
6780 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
6781 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
6782 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
6783 \newcount\defunpenalty
6785 % Start the processing of @deffn:
6787 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
6789 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
6790 % following @def command, see below.
6792 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
6793 % which is there to keep the function description together with its
6794 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
6795 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
6796 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
6797 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
6798 % a break between a section heading and a defun.
6800 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
6801 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
6802 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
6804 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6806 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
6807 % But do insert the glue.
6808 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
6812 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
6813 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6817 % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
6820 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
6821 % It's not a great place, though.
6822 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6824 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
6825 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
6827 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
6829 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
6831 \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
6833 % call \deffnheader:
6836 \interlinepenalty = 10000
6837 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
6839 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
6840 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
6841 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
6842 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
6847 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
6849 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
6850 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
6853 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
6854 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
6855 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
6859 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
6861 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
6862 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
6864 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
6867 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
6868 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
6870 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
6874 \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
6875 \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
6877 % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
6878 % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
6879 % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
6881 \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
6884 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6886 \else\ifx\temp\offword
6887 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6890 \errhelp = \EMsimple
6891 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
6896 % Untyped functions:
6898 % @deffn category name args
6899 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
6901 % @deffn category class name args
6902 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6904 % \defopon {category on}class name args
6905 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6907 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
6909 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
6910 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
6911 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
6912 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
6917 % @deftypefn category type name args
6918 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
6920 % @deftypeop category class type name args
6921 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6923 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
6924 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6926 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
6928 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6929 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6931 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6936 % @deftypevr category type var args
6937 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
6939 % @deftypecv category class type var args
6940 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6942 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
6943 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6945 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
6947 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6948 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6949 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6952 % Untyped variables:
6954 % @defvr category var args
6955 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
6957 % @defcv category class var args
6958 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6960 % \defcvof {category of}class var args
6961 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
6965 % @deftp category name args
6966 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
6967 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
6968 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
6971 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
6972 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6973 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
6974 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
6975 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6976 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6977 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
6978 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6979 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
6980 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
6981 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6982 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6984 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
6985 % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
6986 % #2 is the return type, if any.
6987 % #3 is the function name.
6989 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
6991 \def\defname#1#2#3{%
6993 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
6994 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
6996 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
6997 % on a line by itself.
6998 \rettypeownlinefalse
6999 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
7000 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
7001 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
7006 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
7007 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
7010 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
7012 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
7016 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
7017 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
7018 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
7020 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
7022 \advance\tempnum by 1
7023 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
7025 \def\maybeshapeline{}%
7028 % The continuations:
7029 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
7031 % The final paragraph shape:
7032 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
7034 % Put the category name at the right margin.
7037 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
7038 % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
7040 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
7043 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
7044 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
7045 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
7047 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
7048 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
7049 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
7050 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
7051 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
7052 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
7053 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
7054 % one has made identifiers using them :).
7056 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
7057 \ifx\temp\empty\else
7058 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7060 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7061 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
7063 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7065 \fi % no return type
7066 #3% output function name
7068 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
7071 % arguments will be output next, if any.
7074 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
7075 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
7076 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
7077 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
7080 % use sl by default (not ttsl),
7082 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
7084 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
7085 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
7086 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
7088 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
7091 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7094 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
7095 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
7099 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7100 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
7102 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
7103 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7104 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7107 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
7108 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
7111 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
7112 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
7115 \newcount\parencount
7117 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7119 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
7123 % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7124 % otherwise use the default font.
7125 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
7127 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7128 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7132 \def\infirstlevel#1{%
7139 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7142 \global\advance\parencount by 1
7144 \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7149 \global\advance\parencount by -1
7152 \newcount\brackcount
7154 \global\advance\brackcount by 1
7159 \global\advance\brackcount by -1
7162 \def\checkparencounts{%
7163 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
7164 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7166 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7167 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
7168 \def\badparencount{%
7169 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
7170 \global\parencount=0
7172 \def\badbrackcount{%
7173 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
7174 \global\brackcount=0
7181 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
7182 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
7183 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7184 \newwrite\macscribble
7187 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
7188 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
7189 \immediate\closeout\macscribble
7194 \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
7196 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
7198 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
7199 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
7200 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
7201 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
7202 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
7203 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
7205 % ... and for \example:
7208 % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
7209 % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
7210 % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
7211 % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
7212 % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
7213 % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
7214 % line-oriented commands.
7216 \scantokens{#1\empty}%
7220 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
7224 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
7225 \newtoks\macname % Macro name
7226 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
7228 % List of all defined macros in the form
7229 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
7230 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
7231 % if there is a need.
7234 % Add the macro to \macrolist
7235 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
7236 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
7237 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
7238 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
7242 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
7243 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
7244 % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
7248 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
7252 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
7253 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
7255 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
7256 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
7257 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
7259 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
7262 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
7263 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
7264 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
7265 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
7266 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
7269 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
7270 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
7271 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
7272 % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
7274 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
7275 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
7276 % confine the change to the current group.
7278 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
7279 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
7280 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
7282 \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
7292 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
7295 \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
7298 \catcode`\^^M=\other
7301 \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
7305 \catcode`\^^M=\other
7309 \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
7313 % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
7314 % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
7315 % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
7317 % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
7318 % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
7319 % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
7321 \def\\{\normalbackslash}%
7323 % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
7324 % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
7325 % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
7327 % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
7330 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
7331 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
7332 % where N is the macro parameter number.
7333 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
7334 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
7336 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
7337 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
7338 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
7340 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
7342 \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
7344 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
7345 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
7348 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
7349 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
7352 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
7353 \if\paramno>256\relax
7354 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7355 \errhelp = \EMsimple
7356 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
7360 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
7361 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
7363 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
7364 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
7365 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
7366 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
7367 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
7369 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
7370 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
7371 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
7374 \parseargdef\unmacro{%
7375 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
7376 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
7377 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
7378 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
7380 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
7381 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
7382 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
7385 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
7389 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
7390 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
7396 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
7400 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
7401 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
7402 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
7403 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
7404 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
7405 \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
7406 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
7408 % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
7409 \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
7410 \catcode `@=11\relax
7412 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
7413 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
7414 % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If
7415 % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
7416 % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
7417 % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
7419 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
7421 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
7422 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
7423 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
7424 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
7426 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
7427 % the macro is used.
7429 % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
7430 % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
7431 % processed again to replace the arguments.
7433 % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
7434 % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
7435 % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
7437 % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
7438 % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
7439 % error is produced.
7440 \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
7441 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
7443 \let\xeatspaces\relax
7444 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
7445 % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
7446 % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
7447 % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
7448 % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
7449 % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
7450 % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
7451 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
7453 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
7456 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
7457 \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7458 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
7459 \advance\paramno by 1
7460 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
7461 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
7462 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
7465 \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
7466 \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7468 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
7469 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
7470 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
7471 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
7472 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
7473 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
7475 \expandafter\edef\tempa
7476 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
7477 \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7480 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
7481 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
7484 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
7485 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
7486 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7487 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
7488 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7489 \catcode `\@=11\relax
7494 \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
7496 % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
7497 % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
7500 % #1 is the macro name
7501 % #2 is the list of argument names
7502 % #3 is the list of argument values
7503 \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
7504 \def\macargdeflist@{}%
7505 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
7506 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
7510 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
7521 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7522 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
7523 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7525 \errhelp = \EMsimple
7526 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
7528 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7530 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7531 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
7533 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7535 % pop current arg name into \@tempb
7536 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
7537 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
7538 % pop current argument value into \@tempc
7539 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
7540 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
7541 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
7542 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
7543 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7544 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
7545 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
7546 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
7547 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
7548 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
7549 \let\next\getargvals@@
7556 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
7557 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
7558 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
7562 % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
7564 \def\macvalstoargs@{%
7565 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
7566 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
7567 % values into respective token registers.
7569 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
7572 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
7573 % value into a new token list register \toks#N
7574 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
7575 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
7576 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
7577 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
7578 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
7579 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
7580 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
7584 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7587 \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
7588 %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
7592 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
7595 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
7597 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
7598 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
7605 % And now we do the real job:
7606 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
7610 \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
7611 \if#1;\let\next\relax
7613 \let\next\putargsintokens@
7614 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
7616 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
7617 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
7618 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
7619 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
7620 \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7625 % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
7626 \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
7627 % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
7628 \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
7629 % newtoks that can be used non \outer .
7630 \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
7632 % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
7633 \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
7634 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7635 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7637 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
7638 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7643 \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
7644 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
7645 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
7646 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
7650 % #1 is the element target macro
7651 % #2 is the list macro
7652 % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
7653 \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7657 \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7662 % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
7663 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
7664 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
7665 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
7666 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
7669 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
7673 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7674 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7676 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7677 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7678 \noexpand\braceorline
7679 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7680 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7681 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7683 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
7684 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7685 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7686 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7687 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7688 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7689 \expandafter\expandafter
7691 \expandafter\expandafter
7692 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7693 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7695 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7696 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7698 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7699 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
7705 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7706 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7707 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7709 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7710 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7711 \noexpand\braceorline
7712 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7713 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7715 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7716 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7718 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
7719 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7720 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7721 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7722 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7723 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7724 \expandafter\expandafter
7726 \expandafter\expandafter
7727 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7730 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7731 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7733 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7734 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7736 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7737 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
7742 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
7744 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
7746 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
7747 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
7748 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
7749 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
7751 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
7752 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
7753 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
7754 \expandafter\parsearg
7759 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
7760 % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
7762 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
7763 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
7764 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
7766 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
7767 \addtomacrolist{#1}%
7768 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
7774 \message{cross references,}
7777 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
7778 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
7780 % @inforef is relatively simple.
7781 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
7782 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
7783 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
7784 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
7786 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
7787 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
7788 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
7789 % @node foo , bar , ...
7790 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
7792 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
7794 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
7795 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
7796 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
7797 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
7800 \let\lastnode=\empty
7802 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
7803 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
7806 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
7807 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
7808 \global\let\lastnode=\empty
7812 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
7814 \newcount\savesfregister
7816 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
7817 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
7818 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
7820 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
7821 % anchor), which consists of three parts:
7822 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
7823 % or the anchor name.
7824 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
7825 % empty for anchors.
7826 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
7828 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
7829 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
7830 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
7836 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
7837 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
7838 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
7839 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
7841 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
7842 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
7843 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
7844 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
7849 % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
7850 % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
7851 % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
7852 % variable, now it's official.
7854 \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
7857 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7859 \else\ifx\temp\offword
7860 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7863 \errhelp = \EMsimple
7864 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
7870 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
7871 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
7872 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
7873 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
7875 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7876 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7877 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7880 \newbox\printedrefnamebox
7881 \newbox\infofilenamebox
7882 \newbox\printedmanualbox
7884 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
7887 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
7888 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
7889 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
7891 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
7892 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
7894 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
7895 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
7897 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
7898 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
7899 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7900 % No printed node name was explicitly given.
7901 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
7902 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
7903 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7905 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
7906 % the square brackets if we have it.
7907 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7908 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
7909 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7912 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
7913 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
7915 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
7916 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7922 % Make link in pdf output.
7926 \makevalueexpandable
7927 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
7928 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
7929 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
7932 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
7933 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
7934 \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
7935 \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
7936 \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
7938 \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
7942 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
7943 \ifnum\filenamelength>0
7944 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
7946 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
7949 \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
7952 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
7953 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
7954 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
7956 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
7957 % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
7960 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
7961 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
7963 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
7964 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
7965 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
7966 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7972 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
7974 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7975 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
7978 % node/anchor (non-float) references.
7980 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
7981 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
7982 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
7983 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
7984 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
7985 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
7987 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7988 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
7990 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
7992 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
7993 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
7994 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
7995 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
7997 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
8000 % Reference within this manual.
8002 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
8003 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
8004 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
8005 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
8006 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
8008 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
8009 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
8010 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
8011 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
8013 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
8014 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
8016 % But we always want a comma and a space:
8019 % output the `page 3'.
8020 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
8026 % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
8028 % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
8029 % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
8030 % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
8032 % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
8033 % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
8034 % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
8035 % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
8036 % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
8038 % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
8039 % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
8041 \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
8042 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
8043 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
8044 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
8045 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
8046 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
8052 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
8053 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
8054 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
8055 % one that Bob is working on :).
8057 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
8059 % Things referred to by \setref.
8065 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
8066 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8067 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
8068 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8069 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8071 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8076 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
8077 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8078 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
8079 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8080 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8083 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8087 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
8088 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
8094 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
8095 \csname XR#1\endcsname
8098 % If not defined, say something at least.
8099 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
8102 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
8103 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
8106 \global\warnedxrefstrue
8107 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
8112 % It's defined, so just use it.
8115 #2% Output the suffix in any case.
8118 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
8119 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
8120 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
8123 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
8124 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
8125 % mess up the control sequence name.
8128 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
8131 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
8133 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
8134 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
8135 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
8136 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
8137 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
8139 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
8140 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
8141 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
8143 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
8144 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
8147 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
8148 % for later use in \listoffloats.
8149 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
8154 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
8157 \openin 1 \jobname.aux
8160 \global\havexrefstrue
8165 \def\setupdatafile{%
8166 \catcode`\^^@=\other
8167 \catcode`\^^A=\other
8168 \catcode`\^^B=\other
8169 \catcode`\^^C=\other
8170 \catcode`\^^D=\other
8171 \catcode`\^^E=\other
8172 \catcode`\^^F=\other
8173 \catcode`\^^G=\other
8174 \catcode`\^^H=\other
8175 \catcode`\^^K=\other
8176 \catcode`\^^L=\other
8177 \catcode`\^^N=\other
8178 \catcode`\^^P=\other
8179 \catcode`\^^Q=\other
8180 \catcode`\^^R=\other
8181 \catcode`\^^S=\other
8182 \catcode`\^^T=\other
8183 \catcode`\^^U=\other
8184 \catcode`\^^V=\other
8185 \catcode`\^^W=\other
8186 \catcode`\^^X=\other
8187 \catcode`\^^Z=\other
8188 \catcode`\^^[=\other
8189 \catcode`\^^\=\other
8190 \catcode`\^^]=\other
8191 \catcode`\^^^=\other
8192 \catcode`\^^_=\other
8193 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
8194 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
8195 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
8196 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
8197 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
8198 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
8199 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
8200 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
8202 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
8203 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
8204 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
8208 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
8221 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
8223 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
8224 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
8225 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
8226 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
8227 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
8228 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
8229 % now. --karl, 15jan04.
8232 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
8236 \catcode\count1=\other
8237 \advance\count1 by 1
8238 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
8242 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
8248 \def\readdatafile#1{%
8255 \message{insertions,}
8256 % including footnotes.
8258 \newcount \footnoteno
8260 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
8261 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
8262 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
8263 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
8264 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
8265 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
8267 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
8268 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
8272 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
8274 \let\indent=\ptexindent
8275 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
8276 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
8277 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
8279 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
8280 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
8282 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
8284 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
8290 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
8291 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
8293 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
8294 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
8295 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
8298 \insert\footins\bgroup
8299 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
8300 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
8301 % So reset some parameters.
8303 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
8304 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
8305 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
8306 \floatingpenalty\@MM
8311 \parindent\defaultparindent
8315 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
8316 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
8317 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
8318 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
8319 \let\noindent = \relax
8321 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
8322 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
8323 \everypar = {\hang}%
8324 \textindent{\thisfootno}%
8326 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
8327 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
8328 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
8331 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
8332 \futurelet\next\fo@t
8334 }%end \catcode `\@=11
8336 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
8337 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
8339 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
8340 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
8341 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
8343 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
8344 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
8347 \def\startsavinginserts{%
8348 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
8349 \let\insert\saveinsert
8351 \let\checkinserts\relax
8355 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
8356 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
8359 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
8360 \afterassignment\next
8361 % swallow the left brace
8364 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
8365 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
8367 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
8369 \def\placesaveins#1{%
8370 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
8374 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
8376 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
8377 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
8381 \def\newsaveins #1{%
8382 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
8385 \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
8386 \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
8387 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
8392 \let\checkinserts\empty
8397 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
8398 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
8400 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
8401 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
8402 % undone and the next image would fail.
8403 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
8405 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
8406 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
8407 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
8412 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
8413 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
8414 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
8415 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
8416 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
8419 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
8420 \ifwarnednoepsf \else
8421 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
8422 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
8423 \global\warnednoepsftrue
8426 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
8430 % Arguments to @image:
8431 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
8432 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
8433 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
8434 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
8435 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
8437 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
8438 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
8439 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
8440 % If the image is by itself, center it.
8443 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
8444 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
8446 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
8451 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
8452 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
8454 \nobreak\vskip\parskip
8458 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
8459 % environment such as @quotation is respected.
8460 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
8461 % normal paragraph indentation.
8462 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
8463 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
8464 % eradicate the centering.
8465 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
8469 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
8471 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
8472 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
8473 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
8478 \medskip % space after a standalone image
8480 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
8484 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
8485 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
8486 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
8488 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
8490 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
8491 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
8493 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
8494 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
8495 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
8497 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
8500 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
8501 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
8503 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
8504 % chapter-level command.
8505 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
8507 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
8508 \let\thiscaption=\empty
8509 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
8511 % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
8513 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
8514 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
8518 % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
8523 \def\floatlabel{#2}%
8524 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
8526 \ifx\floattype\empty
8527 \let\safefloattype=\empty
8530 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8531 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8534 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8538 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
8539 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8540 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
8541 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
8543 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
8544 \global\advance\floatno by 1
8547 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
8548 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
8549 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
8550 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
8553 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
8554 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
8558 % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
8561 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
8562 \restorefirstparagraphindent
8565 % we have these possibilities:
8566 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
8567 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
8568 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
8569 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
8570 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
8571 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
8572 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
8573 % @float & no caption:
8576 \let\floatident = \empty
8578 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
8579 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
8581 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
8582 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8583 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
8584 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
8587 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8590 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
8591 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
8592 \let\captionline = \floatident
8594 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
8595 \ifx\floatident\empty \else
8596 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
8600 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
8603 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
8604 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
8605 \ifx\captionline\empty \else
8609 % Space below caption.
8613 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
8614 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
8615 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8616 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
8617 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
8618 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
8622 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
8623 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
8624 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
8626 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
8627 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
8634 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
8635 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
8638 \egroup % end of \vtop
8640 % place the captured inserts
8642 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
8643 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
8644 % float. --kasal, 26may04
8649 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
8651 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
8652 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
8655 % @caption, @shortcaption
8657 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
8658 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
8659 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
8660 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
8662 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
8663 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
8666 % Haven't seen this figure type before.
8667 \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
8669 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
8670 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
8671 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
8676 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
8677 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
8678 % first read the @float command.
8680 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8682 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
8683 % distinguish floats from other xref types.
8684 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
8686 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
8687 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
8688 % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
8690 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
8692 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
8693 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
8695 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
8697 \def\iffloattype{#2}%
8698 \ifx\temp\floatmagic
8701 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
8703 \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
8704 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
8706 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8707 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8710 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8713 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
8714 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
8716 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
8717 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
8721 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
8722 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
8723 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
8728 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
8729 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
8730 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
8731 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
8733 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
8734 % they won't appear in the aux file).
8736 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
8737 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
8738 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
8739 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
8740 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
8742 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
8744 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
8745 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
8750 \message{localization,}
8752 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
8753 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
8754 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
8757 \catcode`\_ = \active
8759 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
8760 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
8761 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
8762 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
8763 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8765 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
8767 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8771 \endgroup % end raw TeX
8774 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
8777 \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
8778 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8780 \errhelp = \nolanghelp
8781 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
8783 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8788 }% end of special _ catcode
8790 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
8791 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
8792 directory should work if nowhere else does.}
8794 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
8795 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
8796 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
8798 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
8799 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
8800 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
8802 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
8803 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
8804 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
8805 % accented characters problem.)
8808 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
8809 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
8810 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
8811 \message{no patterns for #1}%
8813 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
8815 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
8816 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
8817 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
8820 % Helpers for encodings.
8821 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
8823 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
8825 \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8826 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
8827 \advance\count255 by 1
8831 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
8833 \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8834 \catcode\count255=#1\relax
8835 \advance\count255 by 1
8839 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
8840 % according to the specified encoding.
8842 \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
8843 % Encoding being declared for the document.
8844 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
8846 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
8847 % to compare them with \ifx.
8848 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
8849 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
8850 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
8851 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
8852 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
8854 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
8857 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
8858 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8861 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
8862 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8865 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
8866 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8869 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
8870 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8874 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
8883 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
8884 % the default font encoding (OT1).
8886 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
8888 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
8889 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
8891 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
8892 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
8893 % macros containing the character definitions.
8894 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8896 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
8897 \def\latonechardefs{%
8899 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
8900 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
8901 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
8902 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8903 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
8904 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
8907 \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
8909 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
8912 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
8915 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8924 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8928 \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
8929 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
8930 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
8931 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
8932 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
8939 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
8941 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8973 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
8975 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
8980 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
8981 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
8982 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
8983 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
9003 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
9004 \def\latninechardefs{%
9005 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
9018 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
9019 \def\lattwochardefs{%
9021 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
9024 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
9030 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
9035 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
9037 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
9038 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
9039 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
9045 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
9047 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
9052 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
9061 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
9064 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
9080 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
9085 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
9095 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
9098 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
9101 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9102 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9114 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
9119 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
9120 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
9123 % UTF-8 character definitions.
9125 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
9126 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
9127 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
9133 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
9134 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
9136 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
9137 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
9139 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
9140 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
9142 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
9144 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
9155 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
9156 \uccode`\~\countUTFx
9157 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
9158 \advance\countUTFx by 1
9159 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
9160 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
9166 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
9172 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
9178 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
9191 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
9192 \countUTFz = "#1\relax
9193 %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
9196 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
9197 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
9198 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
9199 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
9200 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
9201 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
9202 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9203 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9204 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
9207 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
9208 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
9209 \errhelp = \EMsimple
9210 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
9211 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
9213 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
9214 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
9217 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
9222 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
9226 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
9227 \countUTFx = \countUTFz
9228 \divide\countUTFz by 64
9229 \countUTFy = \countUTFz
9230 \multiply\countUTFz by 64
9231 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
9232 \advance\countUTFx by 128
9233 \uccode `#1\countUTFx
9234 \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
9236 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
9237 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
9238 \uccode `#3\countUTFz
9239 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
9242 \def\utfeightchardefs{%
9243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
9244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
9245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
9246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
9247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
9248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
9249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
9250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
9251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
9252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
9254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
9255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
9256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
9257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
9258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
9259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
9261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
9262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
9263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
9264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
9265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
9266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
9267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
9268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
9269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
9270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
9271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
9272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
9273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
9274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
9275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
9276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
9278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
9279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
9280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
9281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
9282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
9283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
9284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
9285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
9286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
9287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
9288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
9289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
9290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
9291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
9292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
9294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
9295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
9296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
9297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
9298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
9299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
9300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
9301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
9302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
9303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
9304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
9305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
9306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
9307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
9311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
9312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
9313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
9314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
9315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
9316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
9317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
9318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
9319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
9320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
9321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
9322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
9323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
9324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
9325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
9327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
9328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
9329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
9330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
9331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
9332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
9333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
9334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
9335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
9336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
9337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
9338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
9339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
9340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
9341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
9342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
9343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
9345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
9346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
9347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
9348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
9349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
9350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
9351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
9352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
9353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
9354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
9355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
9356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
9358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
9359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
9360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
9361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
9362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
9363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
9364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
9365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
9366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
9367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
9369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
9370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
9371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
9372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
9373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
9374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
9375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
9376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
9378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
9379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
9380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
9381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
9382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
9383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
9384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
9385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
9386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
9387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
9389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
9390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
9391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
9392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
9393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
9394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
9395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
9396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
9397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
9398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
9399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
9400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
9401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
9402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
9404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
9405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
9406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
9407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
9408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
9410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
9411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
9412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
9413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
9414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
9415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
9416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
9417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
9419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
9420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
9421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
9422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
9423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
9424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
9425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
9426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
9427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
9428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
9429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
9430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
9431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
9433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
9434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
9435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
9436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
9437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
9438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
9439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
9440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
9441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
9442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
9443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
9444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
9446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
9447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
9448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
9449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
9450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
9452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
9453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
9454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
9455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
9456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
9457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
9459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
9460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
9461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
9462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
9463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
9464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
9465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
9466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
9467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
9468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
9469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
9470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
9472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
9473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
9475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
9476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
9477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
9478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
9479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
9480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
9482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
9483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
9484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
9486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
9488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
9489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
9490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
9491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
9492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
9493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
9494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
9495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
9496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
9497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
9498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
9499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
9501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
9502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
9504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
9505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
9506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
9507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
9508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
9509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
9510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
9511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
9513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
9514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
9515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
9516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
9517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
9518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
9519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
9520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
9521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
9522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
9523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
9524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
9526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
9527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
9528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
9529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
9530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
9531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
9532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
9533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
9534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
9535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
9537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
9538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
9539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
9540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
9541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
9542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
9543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
9544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
9545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
9546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
9548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
9549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
9550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
9551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
9552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
9553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
9554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
9555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
9556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
9557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
9559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
9560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
9561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
9562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
9564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
9565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
9566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
9567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
9568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
9569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
9570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
9571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
9572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
9573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
9574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
9575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
9576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
9577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
9578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
9579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
9581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
9582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
9583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
9584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
9585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
9586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
9587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
9588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
9589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
9590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
9592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
9593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
9595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
9596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
9597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
9598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
9600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
9601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
9602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
9603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
9605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
9606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
9608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
9609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
9610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
9612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
9613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
9615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
9616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
9617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
9618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
9619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
9620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
9621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
9622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
9623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
9624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
9625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
9626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
9627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
9629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
9630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
9632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
9633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
9634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
9635 }% end of \utfeightchardefs
9638 % US-ASCII character definitions.
9639 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
9643 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
9644 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
9645 % document encoding.
9647 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
9650 \message{formatting,}
9652 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
9654 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
9655 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
9656 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
9658 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
9661 % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
9664 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
9668 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
9669 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
9670 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
9671 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
9673 \def\setemergencystretch{%
9674 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
9675 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
9676 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
9678 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
9682 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
9683 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
9684 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
9686 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
9687 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
9689 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
9692 \splittopskip = \topskip
9695 \advance\vsize by \topskip
9696 \outervsize = \vsize
9697 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
9698 \pageheight = \vsize
9701 \outerhsize = \hsize
9702 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
9705 \normaloffset = #4\relax
9706 \bindingoffset = #5\relax
9709 \pdfpageheight #7\relax
9710 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
9711 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
9712 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
9713 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
9714 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
9717 \setleading{\textleading}
9719 \parindent = \defaultparindent
9720 \setemergencystretch
9723 % @letterpaper (the default).
9724 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9725 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9726 \textleading = 13.2pt
9728 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
9729 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
9731 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
9735 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
9736 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9737 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
9740 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
9742 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
9745 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
9748 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9749 \defbodyindent = .5cm
9752 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
9753 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
9754 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9755 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
9758 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
9763 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
9766 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9767 \defbodyindent = .4cm
9770 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
9771 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9772 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9773 \textleading = 13.2pt
9775 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
9776 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
9777 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
9778 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
9779 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
9780 % your texinfo source file like this:
9782 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
9783 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
9785 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
9786 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9787 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9792 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9793 \defbodyindent = 5mm
9796 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
9797 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
9798 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
9799 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9800 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
9801 \textleading = 12.5pt
9803 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
9804 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9805 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
9808 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
9811 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9812 \defbodyindent = 2mm
9816 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
9817 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
9819 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
9821 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9824 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
9828 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
9829 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
9831 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
9832 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
9833 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9838 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
9839 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
9840 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
9842 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
9843 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
9844 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
9847 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9848 \setleading{\textleading}%
9851 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
9854 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
9856 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
9857 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
9858 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9862 % Set default to letter.
9867 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
9869 \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
9871 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
9874 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
9875 \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
9876 \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
9877 \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
9878 \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
9879 \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
9880 \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
9881 \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
9882 \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
9883 \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
9885 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
9886 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
9887 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
9889 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
9890 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
9891 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
9892 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
9894 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9896 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
9897 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
9898 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
9899 % this is not a problem.
9900 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9902 % Turn off all special characters except @
9903 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
9904 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
9905 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
9908 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
9909 \let"=\activedoublequote
9911 \def~{{\tt\char126}}
9917 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
9919 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
9920 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
9923 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
9931 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
9933 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
9935 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
9936 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
9937 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
9938 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
9939 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
9941 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
9943 \def\turnoffactive{%
9944 \normalturnoffactive
9950 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
9952 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
9953 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
9955 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
9956 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
9957 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
9959 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
9960 % in fixed width font.
9961 \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
9963 % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
9964 % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
9965 % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
9966 % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
9967 % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
9968 % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
9969 % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
9970 % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
9971 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
9972 @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
9974 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
9975 % @let \ = @normalbackslash
9976 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
9977 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
9978 % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
9979 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
9980 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
9982 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
9983 % the literal character `\'.
9985 @def@normalturnoffactive{%
9986 @let"=@normaldoublequote
9987 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
9990 @let>=@normalgreater
9991 @let\=@normalbackslash
9993 @let_=@normalunderscore
9994 @let|=@normalverticalbar
9996 @markupsetuplqdefault
9997 @markupsetuprqdefault
10001 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
10002 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
10005 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
10006 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
10009 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
10010 @global@let\ = @eatinput
10012 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
10013 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
10014 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
10015 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
10016 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
10018 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
10019 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
10021 @catcode`@_=@active
10024 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
10027 % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
10028 % active definitions as the normal characters.
10030 @def@normalquest{?}
10031 @def@normalslash{/}
10033 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
10034 % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
10035 @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
10036 @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
10037 @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
10039 @let @hashchar = @normalhash
10041 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
10042 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
10043 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
10044 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
10045 @catcode`@'=@active
10046 @catcode`@`=@active
10047 @markupsetuplqdefault
10048 @markupsetuprqdefault
10050 @c Local variables:
10051 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
10052 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
10053 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
10054 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
10055 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
10061 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115